Hardware Service Manual
700S High Performance AC Drives and700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drives
Frame 9 (132 -160 KW 200-250 HP)
Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwabcommanualsgi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
PowerFlex is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc
DriveExplorer DriveExecutive and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc
WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you
bull identify a hazardbull avoid the hazardbull recognize the consequences
Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures
Table of Contents
Important User Information 1-2
Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual P-1What is in this Manual P-1What is Not in this Manual P-2Reference Materials P-2Understanding Manual Conventions P-3Additional Support Available on Internet P-3General Precautions P-4
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Error CodesCreating Fault Reports 1-2Addressing 700S Hardware Faults 1-2Addressing 700H Hardware Faults 1-3Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom 1-5
Chapter 2 Component Test ProceduresForward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components 2-1Checking Rectifying Module 2-4Checking the Main Fan 2-7Checking Capacitors 2-8Checking AC-Choke 2-9Checking Terminals 2-10
Chapter 3 Access ProceduresTorque Specifications 3-1Opening Drive 3-4Removing the DPI HIM Assembly 3-6Removing 700S Control Assembly 3-8Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 3-10Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board 3-12Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly 3-14Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board 3-15Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate 3-17Removing the EMC-Protection Plate 3-20Removing the Power Module 3-23Removing the Rectifying Module 3-27Removing the Main Fan 3-32Removing the Fan Power Supply 3-34Removing Capacitors 3-38Removing the AC-Choke 3-40
Chapter 4 Start-Up After RepairLoading the 700H EEPROM 4-1Before Applying Power to the Drive 4-2Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional) 4-4Testing Without a Motor 4-5Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S 4-5Testing With the Motor 4-6
2
Appendix A Service Tools and EquipmentSoftware Tools A-1Service tools A-1
Appendix B Schematicsput Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input B-1Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input B-2Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input B-3Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input B-4Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input B-5Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives B-6Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives B-7Fan Power Supply Connections B-8
Appendix C Disassembly Assembly Diagrams700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-2700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-3Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan C-4EMC-Protection Plate C-5Capacitor Sub-Assembly C-6Fan Sub-Assembly C-7Control Bracket C-8Rectifying Module C-9Power Module C-10Key to ID Numbers C-11
Preface
Overview
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions
What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTED
IND CONT EQ
9D42
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTEDIND CONT EQ
9D42
p-2 Overview
What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive
Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature
The following publications provide general drive information
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information
The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller
Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control
SGI-11
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452
Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN001
Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN004
Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN006
Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)
PFLEX-RM001
Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)
PFLEX-RM002
Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005
Overview p-3
Understanding Manual Conventions
Terms
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action
Cross References
ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2
ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C
Additional Support Available on Internet
Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)
Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended
p-4 Overview
General Precautions Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system
ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-11 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at httpwwwabcommanualsgi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable
In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual
Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited
Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations
Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product
PowerFlex is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc
DriveExplorer DriveExecutive and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation Inc
WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss
ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you
bull identify a hazardbull avoid the hazardbull recognize the consequences
Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present
Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (eg drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures
Table of Contents
Important User Information 1-2
Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual P-1What is in this Manual P-1What is Not in this Manual P-2Reference Materials P-2Understanding Manual Conventions P-3Additional Support Available on Internet P-3General Precautions P-4
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Error CodesCreating Fault Reports 1-2Addressing 700S Hardware Faults 1-2Addressing 700H Hardware Faults 1-3Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom 1-5
Chapter 2 Component Test ProceduresForward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components 2-1Checking Rectifying Module 2-4Checking the Main Fan 2-7Checking Capacitors 2-8Checking AC-Choke 2-9Checking Terminals 2-10
Chapter 3 Access ProceduresTorque Specifications 3-1Opening Drive 3-4Removing the DPI HIM Assembly 3-6Removing 700S Control Assembly 3-8Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 3-10Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board 3-12Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly 3-14Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board 3-15Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate 3-17Removing the EMC-Protection Plate 3-20Removing the Power Module 3-23Removing the Rectifying Module 3-27Removing the Main Fan 3-32Removing the Fan Power Supply 3-34Removing Capacitors 3-38Removing the AC-Choke 3-40
Chapter 4 Start-Up After RepairLoading the 700H EEPROM 4-1Before Applying Power to the Drive 4-2Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional) 4-4Testing Without a Motor 4-5Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S 4-5Testing With the Motor 4-6
2
Appendix A Service Tools and EquipmentSoftware Tools A-1Service tools A-1
Appendix B Schematicsput Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input B-1Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input B-2Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input B-3Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input B-4Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input B-5Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives B-6Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives B-7Fan Power Supply Connections B-8
Appendix C Disassembly Assembly Diagrams700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-2700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-3Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan C-4EMC-Protection Plate C-5Capacitor Sub-Assembly C-6Fan Sub-Assembly C-7Control Bracket C-8Rectifying Module C-9Power Module C-10Key to ID Numbers C-11
Preface
Overview
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions
What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTED
IND CONT EQ
9D42
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTEDIND CONT EQ
9D42
p-2 Overview
What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive
Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature
The following publications provide general drive information
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information
The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller
Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control
SGI-11
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452
Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN001
Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN004
Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN006
Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)
PFLEX-RM001
Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)
PFLEX-RM002
Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005
Overview p-3
Understanding Manual Conventions
Terms
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action
Cross References
ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2
ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C
Additional Support Available on Internet
Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)
Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended
p-4 Overview
General Precautions Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system
ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
Table of Contents
Important User Information 1-2
Preface OverviewWho Should Use this Manual P-1What is in this Manual P-1What is Not in this Manual P-2Reference Materials P-2Understanding Manual Conventions P-3Additional Support Available on Internet P-3General Precautions P-4
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Error CodesCreating Fault Reports 1-2Addressing 700S Hardware Faults 1-2Addressing 700H Hardware Faults 1-3Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom 1-5
Chapter 2 Component Test ProceduresForward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components 2-1Checking Rectifying Module 2-4Checking the Main Fan 2-7Checking Capacitors 2-8Checking AC-Choke 2-9Checking Terminals 2-10
Chapter 3 Access ProceduresTorque Specifications 3-1Opening Drive 3-4Removing the DPI HIM Assembly 3-6Removing 700S Control Assembly 3-8Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 3-10Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board 3-12Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly 3-14Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board 3-15Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate 3-17Removing the EMC-Protection Plate 3-20Removing the Power Module 3-23Removing the Rectifying Module 3-27Removing the Main Fan 3-32Removing the Fan Power Supply 3-34Removing Capacitors 3-38Removing the AC-Choke 3-40
Chapter 4 Start-Up After RepairLoading the 700H EEPROM 4-1Before Applying Power to the Drive 4-2Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional) 4-4Testing Without a Motor 4-5Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S 4-5Testing With the Motor 4-6
2
Appendix A Service Tools and EquipmentSoftware Tools A-1Service tools A-1
Appendix B Schematicsput Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input B-1Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input B-2Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input B-3Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input B-4Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input B-5Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives B-6Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives B-7Fan Power Supply Connections B-8
Appendix C Disassembly Assembly Diagrams700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-2700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-3Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan C-4EMC-Protection Plate C-5Capacitor Sub-Assembly C-6Fan Sub-Assembly C-7Control Bracket C-8Rectifying Module C-9Power Module C-10Key to ID Numbers C-11
Preface
Overview
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions
What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTED
IND CONT EQ
9D42
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTEDIND CONT EQ
9D42
p-2 Overview
What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive
Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature
The following publications provide general drive information
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information
The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller
Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control
SGI-11
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452
Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN001
Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN004
Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN006
Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)
PFLEX-RM001
Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)
PFLEX-RM002
Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005
Overview p-3
Understanding Manual Conventions
Terms
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action
Cross References
ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2
ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C
Additional Support Available on Internet
Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)
Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended
p-4 Overview
General Precautions Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system
ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
2
Appendix A Service Tools and EquipmentSoftware Tools A-1Service tools A-1
Appendix B Schematicsput Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input B-1Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input B-2Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input B-3Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input B-4Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input B-5Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives B-6Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives B-7Fan Power Supply Connections B-8
Appendix C Disassembly Assembly Diagrams700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-2700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction C-3Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan C-4EMC-Protection Plate C-5Capacitor Sub-Assembly C-6Fan Sub-Assembly C-7Control Bracket C-8Rectifying Module C-9Power Module C-10Key to ID Numbers C-11
Preface
Overview
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions
What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTED
IND CONT EQ
9D42
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTEDIND CONT EQ
9D42
p-2 Overview
What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive
Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature
The following publications provide general drive information
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information
The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller
Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control
SGI-11
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452
Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN001
Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN004
Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN006
Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)
PFLEX-RM001
Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)
PFLEX-RM002
Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005
Overview p-3
Understanding Manual Conventions
Terms
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action
Cross References
ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2
ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C
Additional Support Available on Internet
Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)
Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended
p-4 Overview
General Precautions Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system
ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
Preface
Overview
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for troubleshooting and repairing high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H AC Drives You should have previous experience with and basic understanding of electrical terminology procedures required troubleshooting equipment equipment protection procedures and methods and safety precautions
What is in this Manual This manual contains hardware service information for Frame 9 PowerFlex 700S and 700H drives only Verify that you are working on a Frame 9 drive by checking the data nameplate on the Control Frame The frame number is printed just above the serial number
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTED
IND CONT EQ
9D42
Cat No 20D J 300 N 0 NNNBNNNN
UL Open TypeIP00540V 650V
Normal Duty Power 160 kW132 kW
250 kW200 kWHeavy Duty Power
DC Voltage Range 462 - 594350
583 - 713350Amps
Input DC
AC Voltage Range 0 - 40050 Hz
0 - 46060 HzBase Hz (default)
Output 3 Phase 0 - 320Hz
Continuous Amps 300245330368
3002453303681 Min Overload Amps
2 Sec Overload Amps 450490 450490MFD in 1989 on Nov 9 Frame 9
Serial Number 2622381652
2622381652MADE IN THE USA (FAC 1B)
Series AStandard IO NONE
Original Firmware No 204
UL USC AElig
LISTEDIND CONT EQ
9D42
p-2 Overview
What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive
Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature
The following publications provide general drive information
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information
The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller
Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control
SGI-11
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452
Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN001
Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN004
Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN006
Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)
PFLEX-RM001
Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)
PFLEX-RM002
Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005
Overview p-3
Understanding Manual Conventions
Terms
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action
Cross References
ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2
ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C
Additional Support Available on Internet
Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)
Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended
p-4 Overview
General Precautions Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system
ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
p-2 Overview
What is Not in this Manual This manual does not contain in depth fault information for troubleshooting That information is available in publications 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive PFLEX-IN006 Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and 20D-UM001 User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance AC Drive
Reference Materials Allen-Bradley publications are available on the internet at wwwrockwellautomationcomliterature
The following publications provide general drive information
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information
The following publications provide information that is necessary when applying the DriveLogix Controller
Title PublicationWiring and Grounding Guide (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control
SGI-11
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 0100-210Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-452
Title PublicationProgramming Manual - PowerFlex 700H AC Drive 20C-PM001User Manual - PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive 20D-UM001Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN001
Installation Instructions - Multi Device Interface Option for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN004
Installation Instructions - Main Control Board PowerFlex 700S Drives 20D-IN005Installation Instructions - Control Assembly Cover for PowerFlex 700S Drives
20D-IN006
Installation Instructions - PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives PFLEX-IN006Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 1 - 70 amp 700)
PFLEX-RM001
Reference Manual - PowerFlex Adjustable Frequency Drive (Volume 2 - 700S)
PFLEX-RM002
Title PublicationUser Manual - DriveLogix System 20D-UM002Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN002Installation Instructions - Memory Expansion for DriveLogix Controller 20D-IN007ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN002ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 1788-IN005
Overview p-3
Understanding Manual Conventions
Terms
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action
Cross References
ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2
ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C
Additional Support Available on Internet
Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)
Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended
p-4 Overview
General Precautions Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system
ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
Overview p-3
Understanding Manual Conventions
Terms
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action
Cross References
ldquoFigure 22 on page 2-6rdquo is a cross reference to figure 22 on page 5 of Chapter 2
ldquoFigure C1 on page C-2rdquo is a cross reference to figure C1 on page 2 of Appendix C
Additional Support Available on Internet
Additional troubleshooting information and software tools are available on the Allen-Bradley Drives Support Website (httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives)
Word MeaningCan Possible able to do somethingCannot Not possible not able to do somethingMay Permitted allowedMust Unavoidable you must do thisShall Required and necessaryShould RecommendedShould Not Not recommended
p-4 Overview
General Precautions Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system
ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
p-4 Overview
General Precautions Class 1 LED Product
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into module ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system
ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with high power PowerFlex 700S and 700H Drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury andor equipment damage
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscilloscope chassis may be at a potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage waveforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi-differential mode with the oscilloscope chassis correctly grounded to an earth ground
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
Chapter 1
Troubleshooting and Error Codes
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
1-2 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Creating Fault Reports Clear and complete fault reports are critical for analysis and repair of modules returned to the factory
At a minimum perform and record the following
bull Record the contents of the fault queue (faults and times of occurrence)bull Make record of any burn marks on the rectifying module DC-capacitors
inverter bridge charging resistors balancingprecharging resistors printed circuit boards bus bars cabling and fiber-optic cabling
bull Make record of any liquid and condensation marks on printed circuit boards components and mechanical parts
bull Make record of the amount of dust and other additional particles on drive and drive components
bull Make record of any mechanical damage to the drive and drive components
bull Record the size and type of main fusesbull Record any other important marks and damage
Addressing 700S Hardware Faults Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
HiHp In PhaseLs 65 AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases
1 Check for voltage on each input phase
2 Check the status of each external input fuses
HiHp Bus Com Dly 66 Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus Link LS 67 Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus CRC Er 68 Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus
Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
HiHp Bus WtchDog 69 Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus causing the watch dog timer to expire
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls 70 Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal has been lost
1 Check the main cooling fan2 Check the Main Control
Board cooling fan
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-3
Addressing 700H Hardware Faults
HiHp Drv OvrLoad 71 Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload
Measure output current of the drive If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels then replace the power module
HiHp PwrBd PrcEr 72 Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error
1 Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
2 Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board
3 Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
4 Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board
5 Replace the Main Control Board
HiHp PrChrg Cntc 73 Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed This fault only applies to DC input drives
bull Check precharge circuit wiring
bull Check for loose connections on X50 terminal block
HiHp PwrEE Error 74 Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match
Replace output power module or program a new power board
HiHP PwrBd OTemp 75 Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85deg C
Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply replace if necessary
Fault No Description Action (if appropriate)
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)Power Loss 3 DC bus voltage remained below
[Power Loss Volts] for longer than [Power Loss Time] EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption
UnderVoltage 4 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 333V for 400480V drives and 461V for 600 690V drives EnableDisable with [Fault Config 1] For more information refer to publication 20C-PM001 Programming Manual - PowerFlex 700H
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption
1-4 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
OverVoltage 5 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install and external dynamic brake option
Input Phase 10 One input line phase missing Check user-supplied fusesCheck AC input line voltage
OutPhasMissng 11 Zero current in one output motor phase
Check motor wiringCheck motor for open phase
Ground Fault 13 A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Ground fault level is 50 of the drives heavy duty current rating The current must appear for 800ms before the drive will fault
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition
InverterFault 14 Hardware problem in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
System Fault 16 Hardware problem exists in the power structure
Cycle powerReplace drive
Load Loss 46Power Unit 70 One or more of the output transistors
were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage
Clear fault
Name No Description Action (if appropriate)
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-5
Diagnostic Procedures by Symptom
The following charts list drive symptom symptom descriptions and recommended actions
Blown Input Fuses
Use this procedure when a drive clears any of its external circuit breaker or power fuses
RectifyingModule
OK
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Disconnect MotorLeads
Perform ForwardDiode Tests on
Rectifying Module
Perform ForwardDiode Tests onPower Module
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
Check Motor andLead Resistances
at 1000V
Disconnect ACChoke from
Rectifying Module
ReplaceRectifyingModule
ReplacePowerModule
ReplaceCapacitors
Remedy Motorand LeadProblems
ReplaceAC
Choke
ReconnectAC
Choke
ReconnectMotorLeads
PowerModule
OK
CapacitorsOK
Motor andLead Resistances
gt 1 Mohm
Are ThereAny Line to
Load Shorts
Are ThereAny Line to Line Shorts
1-6 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
No Output Voltage
Use this procedure when there is not voltage present at the drive output terminals even though the drive indicates the motor is running
Measure DC BusVoltage
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
Measure PowerSupply Voltages
Replace PowerSupply
Check BoardConnections
Does DriveRun
Does DriveRun
Replace PowerInterface Board
(on 700S)
Does DriveRun
Replace VoltageFeedback Board
(on 700S)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
Voltages withinSpecification
Replace MainControl Board
Yes
No
Troubleshooting and Error Codes 1-7
No HIM Display
Use this procedure when the HIM does not function
Perform forwarddiode tests on
Rectifying Module
RectifyingModule OK
Replace RectifyingModule
No
Examine BusCapacitors forCharring and
Damaged Reliefs
CapacitorsOK
ReplaceCapacitors
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Measure DC BusVoltage
Measure PowerSupply on X4 of
DPI Circuit Board
Check DPI andPower SupplyConnections
Replace HIM
Does HIMFunction
DC BusVoltage withinSpecification
VoltageEqual 12V dc
Replace Voltage Feedback Board
(on 700S)
Replace OutputPower Module
(on 700H)
Yes
Yes
No
1-8 Troubleshooting and Error Codes
Over-Temperature Faults
Use this procedure to troubleshoot drive over-temperature faults (14 - Inv Otemp Pend and 15 - Inv Otemp Trip in 700S or 8 - Heatsink OvrTemp and 9 - Trnsistr OvrTemp in 700H)
Check SurroundingAir Temperature
TemperatureExceeds
Specification
Provide Additional Airflow
or Air Conditioning
ContactAllen-Bradley
DrivesTechnicalSupport
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CurrentExceeds
Specification
Frequency TooHigh for Lead Length
and Surrounding Temp
Proper SpaceAt Inlet
Power VoltageEquals Bus
Voltage
ConnectionGood
Output Equals50 Hz 220V rms
Fan Motor hasOpen or Short
Circuits
Check Motor Current and Load
Levels
Check PWM Frequency
Check Fan andAir Flow
Through the Drive
Check Power Voltage on Fan
Inverter
Check ConnectionBetween PowerModule CircuitBoard and Fan
Inverter
Check FanInverter Output on
X1 X4 and X5
Check Fan Motorfor Short and Open Circuits
Reduce Load or Procure a DriveWith a Higher
Rating
Lower PWMFrequency
RemedySpacing at
Inlet
Check Fan InverterFuses (F1 and F2)
RepairConnection
ReplaceFan Inverter
ReplaceFan Motor
AirlflowBlockages Yes
Remove Air Flow
Blockages
Yes
No
No
Fan Running
Properly
No
Yes
Chapter 2
Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Major Power Components
A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load)
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
2-2 Component Test Procedures
1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Disconnect the motor leads from the drive
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Figure 21 Measurement Points for Forward Biased Diode Tests on Major Power Components
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
Component Test Procedures 2-3
5 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2A on page 2-3 (on AC Three-Phase drives) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
6 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2B on page 2-3 If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Power Module on page 3-23)
Table 2B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+(1)
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
2-4 Component Test Procedures
Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper
7 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2C on page 2-4 (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 2C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Checking Rectifying Module 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the DPIHIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
5 Remove the 700S Control Assembly (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing 700S Control Assembly on page 3-8
6 Remove the 700S Voltage Feedback circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10
7 Remove the 700S Power Interface circuit board (on a 700S drive) while referring to Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12
8 Remove the 700H Main Control board and enclosure (on a 700H drive) while referring to Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board on page 3-15
9 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
10Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
11Visually inspect the pre-charging resistors If pre-charging resistors are damaged
A Replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
B Check capacitors rectifiers and external connections for short-circuits Referring to Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module on page 2-3 check the Output Power Module
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R- DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR- DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R- 036V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R- Value should gradually rise to 18V
Component Test Procedures 2-5
Measurement of Rectifying Module
12Disconnect connectors X13 X12 X11 and X10
13Perform resistance measurements using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 2D on page 2-5 (on AC Three-Phase drives) These points are on the back of the X10 X11 and X12 plugs which you have disconnected from the board If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2D Rectifying Module Measurements
Checking the Rectifier Circuit Board
14Connect 24V power (from the test power supply) to X13 Pin 5 and 24V Common to X13 Pin 1
15Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply ONrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
16De-energize test power supply Perform ldquoDC Test Power Supply OFFrdquo tests in Table 2E on page 2-6
17If the results differ from measurements shown in Table 2E on page 2-6 replace the Rectifying Module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Measurement points ResistanceX10 red to X10 black
18Ω plusmn 1ΩX11 red to X11 blackX12 red to X12 black
2-6 Component Test Procedures
Figure 22 Rectifying board layout and measurement points
Table 2E Rectifying Board Forward Biased Diode Test Results
Important Power supply polarity is critical during these tests Reversing the polarity will damage components on the circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
X13 Pin 5 (24V dc Power)
X13 Pin 1(24V dc Common)
X10 Pin 1 X11 Pin 1 X12 Pin 1
Precharging Resistors
Meter Leads DC Test Power Supply ON
DC Test Power Supply OFF+ -
J1 X10PIN1 ~ 05V OLJ5 X11PIN1 ~ 5V OLJ9 X12PIN1 ~ 5V OL
Component Test Procedures 2-7
Checking the Brake Chopper
These tests require a recommended multi-meter capable of measuring capacitance
18Disconnect the cable which connects the brake chopper to the Output Power Module connector X11
19Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the grey and white wires on the X11 plug
20Measure gate capacitance (gate to emitter) between the red and black wires on the X11 plug
Important Use correct polarity when you measure gate capacitance
21If measurement results are not similar to values in Table 2F on page 2-7 replace both brake chopper and rectifying module (See Removing the Rectifying Module on page 3-27)
Table 2F Proper Brake Chopper Measurements
Checking the Main Fan 1 Remove power from the drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ an DC-
3 Remove the Connection cover while referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4
4 Remove the fan power supply cover while referring to Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34
5 Disconnect the fan motor from the output filter transformer (Refer to Fan Power Supply Connections on page B-8)
6 Measure the resistance of the fan windings If the resulting measurements are not similar to those in Table 2G on page 2-8 replace the fan (See Removing the Main Fan on page 3-32)
Meter LeadsCapacitance (+- 20)+ -
X11-grey X11-white 50nFX11-red X11-black 50nF
2-8 Component Test Procedures
Table 2G Correct Fan Measurements
7 Disconnect capacitor from fan power supply
8 Measure value of the start capacitor If the resulting value does not equal 7μF replace the capacitor (See Removing the Fan Power Supply on page 3-34)
Checking Capacitors Important This procedure requires special equipment and training Only qualified and trained personnel should perform these procedures
These tests require the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Test each capacitor with a DC-power supply Recommended is to set DC power supply current limit lt 50mA
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Monitor the current while testing
7 Leakage current should be less than 3mA when voltage has stabilized
8 Abort test if current leakage is significantly higher when voltage has stabilized
9 Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
10As a precaution use a resistor to discharge each capacitor after testing Use a proper resistor that can handle the discharging current
11If any capacitor has failed Replace all the capacitors in the same series connection (See Removing Capacitors on page 3-38)
Connection Wires Resistance plusmn 5Black-Brown 62Brown-Blue 36Blue-Black 27
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
135 x 480v = 648v
Component Test Procedures 2-9
Checking AC-Choke 1 Visually inspect the AC-Choke for burn marks
2 Measure the resistance between and across each phase and from each phase to ground to verify that each phase is intact and not shorted to ground
3 If the AC-Choke fails either inspection or tests replace it (See Removing the AC-Choke on page 3-40)
2-10 Component Test Procedures
Checking Terminals Check that cables L1 and L3 do not touch the ferrite ring
If cables are touching the ferrite ring
1 Loosen terminals L1 and L3
2 Push cables L1 and L3 towards cable L2
3 Tighten terminals using torques specified in Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Chapter 3
Access Procedures
Torque Specifications The following table lists fastener torque specifications
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following
ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC+ amp DC- terminals The voltage must be zero
ATTENTION HOT surfaces can cause severe burns Do not touch the heatsink surface during operation of the drive After disconnecting power allow time for cooling
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ATTENTION This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A-B publication 8000-452 ldquoGuarding Against Electrostatic Damagerdquo or any other applicable ESD protection handbook
Item Screw Torque FinalConnection Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrivereg 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Power Cover (mounting) MM4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)Conduit Cover (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m
(27 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly Door M3 x 6 Phillipsreg 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)DPI HIM Assembly (mounting) M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m
(8 lb-in)Shield for 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 05 thread - 37 mm x 37 mm hex standoff
09 N-m (8 lb-in)
3-2 Access Procedures
700S Power Interface Circuit Board (mounting)
M3 x 6 Phillips 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board (mounting) M3 x 5 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
700H Control Board enclosure (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive M4 x 40 Pozidrive
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 09 N-m (8 lb-in)
Control Frame (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Conduit (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
MOV (mounting) M4 x 30 Phillips 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Ground Wire on Cross Plate M6 x 14 hexagonal screw 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Cross Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to DC-link M8 nut 14 N-m(124 lb-in)
AC-choke (terminals) L1 L2 L3 A B C
M8 x 25 hexagonal screw 17 N-m(151 lb-in)
IGBT (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
DC+ DC- and brake cable to top terminals
M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
EMI Protection Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
DC- Bus Bars to rectifierpower busbars
M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (upper mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
RectifierPower Module (lower mounting)
M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Rectifier (terminals) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 9 N-m(80 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Plate (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (top mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Assembly (bottom mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply Capacitor Bracket (mounting)
M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Fan Power Supply (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 18 N-m(15 lb-in)
Capacitor (-) Bus Bar M6 x 16 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar M6 x 14 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Capacitor (+) Bus Bar with bush ring M6 x 20 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
DC+ and DC- cables to Bus Bars M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
Access Procedures 3-3
Pozidrivereg is a registered trademark of the Phillips Screw CompanyPhillipsreg is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company
Understanding Torque Figures in Assembly Diagrams
Icons and numbers in the assembly diagrams indicate how to tighten hardware
Brake chopper (terminals) M5 x 12 Pozidrive 4 N-m(35 lb-in)
Brake chopper Bus Bar (terminal) M8 x 20 hexagonal screw 10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Rectifier (mounting) M6 x 20 Pozidrive 5 N-m(44 lb-in)
Brake chopper (mounting) M6 x 14 Pozidrive 5N-m(44 lb-in)
Rectifying board M4 x 8 Pozidrive 15 N-m(13 lb-in)
AC-choke (upper plate mounting) M8 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
Control Bracket (mounting) M4 x 8 Pozidrive 3 N-m (27 lb-in)
AC-choke (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Motor and AC Line Terminals M8 nut 20 N-m(177 lb-in)
Terminal Strip Assembly (mounting) M5 x 10 Pozidrive 4 N-m (35 lb-in)
Item Screw Torque Final
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Tool Type and SizePZ indicates Pozidrive screwdriver bitP indicates Phillips screwdriver bit
Tightening Torque
Fastener Type
Pozidrive Screw
Phillips Screw
Hexagonal Bolt or StandoffHexagonal ScrewHexagonal Nut
3-4 Access Procedures
Opening Drive Opening
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Remove Connection cover
4 Remove Power cover
(8 Screws)L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3 PZ2
3 N-m (27 lb-in)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(8 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-5
5 Remove Conduit Cover
Closing
The covers may be replaced and removed in any order
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
(3 Screws)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-6 Access Procedures
Removing the DPI HIM Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 Remove two screws from front of DPI HIM assembly
5 Open the door which holds the DPI interface and HIM
6 Unplug the DPI cable from X2 connector on the DPI Interface Circuit Board
7 Unplug the cable from X4 connector on the circuit board (on 700S drives only)
Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Back View of DPI
X4X2
Circuit Board whichshould remain mountedon the back of the assembly
Access Procedures 3-7
8 Remove four mounting screws and the assembly from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the DPI HIM Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Mounting Screws
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3-8 Access Procedures
Removing 700S Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
4 On the 700S control assembly unplug IO and SynchLink cables from the Main Control Board unplug feedback wiring from feedback option card and unplug communication cables from Drivelogix controller
Important Minimum inside bend radius for SynchLink fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into SynchLink fiber-optic ports or SynchLink fiber-optic cable connectors
J7
J2
Captive Screw
Access Procedures 3-9
permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Unplug J2 and J7 ribbon cables from the Main Control Board
6 Loosen captive screw
7 Swing Control Assembly away from drive
8 Lift Control Assembly up and off of hinge
Installation
Install the 700S Control Assembly in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-10 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect fiber-optic cables from sockets J4 and J5 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
ScrewsStandoffs
Shield
J2
J1
J4
J5
(5) (4)
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
3 mm09 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-11
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
5 Disconnect feedback cables from sockets J1 and J2 of the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board
6 Remove the four screws which secure the clear plastic shield to the standoffs and remove the shield
7 Remove the five standoffs which support the clear plastic shield and secure the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board to its mounting plate
8 Remove the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board from its mounting plate
Installation
Install the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-12 Access Procedures
Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover from the drive
4 Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables from sockets along the top side of the Power Interface Circuit Board and carefully set them aside
5 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from sockets along the right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
Screws(5)
Fiber-OpticSockets
P109 N-m(8 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-13
damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
6 Disconnect other cables from sockets of the circuit board and set them aside
7 Remove the five screws which secure the Power Interface Circuit Board to the Control Frame
8 Remove the circuit board from the Control Frame
Installation
Install the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
3-14 Access Procedures
Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Open the enclosure that contains the Control and IO Boards and carefully unplug the DPI cable and any IO cables
5 Remove the IO Boards from the Control Board and enclosure Note the order of the boards and the keys which prevent placement of boards in incorrect slots
6 Unplug the serial connection from X7 of the Control Board
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
Keys
X7
X2(Slot A)
Serial Port
X3(Slot B)
X4(Slot C)
X5(Slot D)
X6(Slot E)
Access Procedures 3-15
7 Remove the three screws which secure the Control Assembly to the drive
8 Remove the Control Assembly
Installation
Install the 700H Control and IO Boards in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the 700H IO Boards and Control Assembly on page 3-14 remove the IO boards and Control Assembly
5 Remove the Control Frame while referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17
Do not remove enclosure cover Enclosure is illustrated without the cover for clarity
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-16 Access Procedures
6 Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket to the drive
7 Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter bracket
8 Disconnect the control power cable from X2 of the Fiber Optic Adapter Board
PZ33 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ209 N-m (8 lb-in)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X7Connects to
Main ControlBoard
X2Connects to
24V dc Power
-H1 through -H7Sockets forFiber-OpticCables
Access Procedures 3-17
9 Carefully disconnect the fiber-optic cables from right side of the circuit board and carefully set them aside
Important Minimum inside bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 254 mm (1 in) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber-optic cable Signal attenuation increases with decreased inside bend radii
10Remove the four screws which secure the Fiber Optic Adapter Board to the bracket
11Remove the Fiber Optic Adapter Board from the bracket
Installation
Install the 700H Fiber Optic Adapter Board in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 If removing a Control Frame from a DC input drive with precharge interlock disconnect the wiring from terminal strip X50
Important Before removing connections and wires mark the connections and wires to avoid incorrect wiring during assembly
ATTENTION Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment This product emits intense light and invisible radiation Do not look into fiber-optic ports or fiber-optic cable connectors
3-18 Access Procedures
6 If removing a Control Frame from a 700S drive remove the Power Interface and Voltage Feedback circuit boards (refer to Removing the 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board on page 3-10 and Removing the 700S Power Interface Circuit Board on page 3-12)
7 If removing a Control Frame from a 700H drive carefully disconnect the connections to the IO boards and Control Assembly and carefully set aside
8 Remove the DPI HIM Assembly while referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6
9 Remove eight screws which secure the Control Frame to the drive
10Remove the six screws which secure the Conduit to the drive
11Remove the Conduit from the drive
12Remove the Control Frame from the drive while carefully routing the cables and wires through the access hole of the Control Frame
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-19
13Disconnect the Cross Plate Fan (if present) MOV and ground wires
14Remove three screws which hold Cross Plate to the drive
15Remove the Cross Plate
6 mm4 N-m(35 lb-in)
P23 N-m(27 lb-in)
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-20 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the Control Frame and Cross Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the EMC-Protection Plate
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-21
7 Disconnect the internal three-phase wiring from the AC choke (if present)
8 Disconnect the output cables from the top of the Power Module
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
Important Be careful not to damage filter capacitors on AC Choke terminals
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
Note the colors of the feedback wires and make sure you re-install the wires on the proper motor phases
Phase Feedback Wire ColorU (T1) BlackV (T2) GreyW (T3) White
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
3-22 Access Procedures
9 Remove four screws which secure the EMI-Protection Plate to the drive Also remove the two screws which secure the common mode inductors
10Disconnect the fan which is mounted on the EMI-Protection Plate
11Remove the EMI-Protection Plate
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-23
Installation
Install the EMC-Protection Plate in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Power Module Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
3-24 Access Procedures
7 Disconnect all of the cables from the Power Module circuit board
X6
X9
X7X1X15X8X5
X11
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Access Procedures 3-25
8 Remove the six screws which connect the Power Module to the DC Bus bars
9 Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Power Module
10Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Power Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
3-26 Access Procedures
11Install the RT1 tool on the Power Module and remove the module from the drive
Access Procedures 3-27
Installation
Install the Power Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Removing the Rectifying Module
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Power Cover Connection Cover and Conduit Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the DPI HIM Assembly on page 3-6 remove the DPI HIM assembly
5 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
6 Referring to Removing the EMC-Protection Plate on page 3-20 remove the EMC-Protection Plate
7 Remove the three-phase AC wiring from the Rectifying Module Also remove the Brake Chopper Cable if present
J9
J1
J5
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
6 mm9 N-m(80 lb-in)
AC Wiring
Brake Chopper Cable
3-28 Access Procedures
8 Disconnect the cables from connectors on the Rectifying Module circuit board
J5
J9
J1
X13 X6 X10 X11
X12
Access Procedures 3-29
9 Remove the three screws which secure Rectifying Module circuit board to the Rectifying Module sub-assembly Do not remove the screws at the top of the module which secure the conducting straps (that connect the circuit board to AC power from the AC Choke)
10Remove the Rectifying Module circuit board
J9
J1
J5
PZ215 N-m(13 lb-in)
3-30 Access Procedures
11Remove the six screws which connect the Rectifying Module to the DC Bus bars
12Remove the three fastening screws at the top of the Rectifying Module
13Loosen (4-5 turns) but do not remove the three fastening screws at the bottom of the Rectifying Module
Remove
Remove
Loosen but do not remove PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
PZ35 N-m(44 lb-in)
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-31
14Install the RT1 tool on the Rectifying Module and remove the module from the drive
Installation
Install the Rectifying Module in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important Before installing a new Rectifying Module be sure to remove the circuit board Mechanical interference with the RT1 tool could damage the new circuit board
3-32 Access Procedures
Removing the Main Fan Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the four rubber bushings which cover the screws which mount the fan assembly
Remove
Access Procedures 3-33
5 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
6 Disconnect the motor lead wires including the ground wire Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
7 Check that the upper mounting bolts securely hold drive on the wall of the system enclosure Remove lower mounting bolts from the bottom of the frame
8 Loosen but do NOT remove four front screws (which are accessible through the holes vacated by the rubber bushings) so that the fan assembly can easily slide off To loosen but not remove these front screws turn them 12 times
9 Remove four screws from bottom of the frame The fan plate should now easily slide down If it does not loosen the front screws another turn and attempt again Continue loosening the screws until the fan plate slides easily from the drive
Important Do not attempt to force the fan plate from the drive This may bend the fan
10Remove fan from fan plate Refer to Figure C6 on page C-7
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
3-34 Access Procedures
Installation
Install the fan in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1 Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting the fan and fan power supply
Removing the Fan Power Supply
Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Remove the screw which secures the fan power supply plate Then lift and pull the plate away from the drive
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-35
5 Disconnect the wires which run from the transformer to the power supply (X4 and X5 on the power supply) Refer to Figure B8 on page B-8 when reconnecting these wires
6 On the fuseholdercapacitor bracket disconnect the capacitor from the transformer Disconnect the power supply cooling fan and the fuses
3-36 Access Procedures
7 Remove the screws which mount the fuseholdercapacitor bracket to the drive and remove the bracket
8 Disconnect the remaining cable from the power supply (X8 on the power supply)
9 Remove the screws which mount the power supply to the drive and remove the power supply
12
34 ON
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
PZ23 N-m (27 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-37
Installation
1 Install the fan power supply and fuseholdercapacitor bracket in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
2 Verify that dip switch S1 is properly configured
3 Install fan power supply plate
X6
X1X4
X5
X7
S1
X2
X8
1
ON
23
4
S11
ON
23
4
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4Off Off On Off
3-38 Access Procedures
Removing Capacitors Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Remove terminal sub-assembly (Number 88 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
6 Disconnect fiber-optic connectors X7 X10 and internal fan cable from power board
7 Remove DC+ and DC- cables (Numbers 112 and 114)
8 Remove twelve (12) screws which connect the Output Power Module and Rectifying Module (if present) to the DC+ and DC- busbars
9 Remove sixteen (16) screws (Numbers 42 44 and 45) from capacitor terminals
45 45 45 45
44 44 44 44
114 112
42 4254 545352
5352
Table 3A Capacitor Sub-assembly Hardware
Id No Description42 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination)44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination)45 Screw M5x20 TX (combination)52 Washer (straight) M8 SFS373853 Washer (cone) M8 DIN67954 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20112 Cable DC+114 Cable DC-
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
6 mm10 N-m(89 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-39
10Remove busbars and insulators
11Remove screws which secure capacitors to drive
12Remove capacitors from drive
Installation
Install the capacitors in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
Important The screws in this sub-assembly vary in length It is critical that you use the correct screws in the correct locations Refer to Table 3A on page 3-38
3-40 Access Procedures
Removing the AC-Choke Removal
1 Remove power from drive
2 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
3 Referring to Opening Drive on page 3-4 remove the Connection Cover from the drive
4 Referring to Removing the Control Frame and Cross Plate on page 3-17 remove the Control Frame and Cross Plate
5 Disconnect the internal DC Bus wires from the DC Bus terminals at the top of the drive
Note the sequence ofhardware and the orientation
of the Belleville (cupped)washer
13 mm14 N-m(124 lb-in)
Access Procedures 3-41
6 Remove nine (9) screws from upper plate
7 Remove control bracket (Number 63 in Figure C1 on page C-2 or Figure C2 on page C-3)
8 Remove all cables from AC-choke terminals
PZ23 N-m(27 lb-in)
6 mm17 N-m(151 lb-in)
3-42 Access Procedures
9 Remove eight (8) fastening screws from AC-choke
10Remove AC-choke from drive by using lifting lugs
Installation
Install the AC-choke in reverse order of removal while referring to Torque Specifications on page 3-1
PZ24 N-m(35 lb-in)
Lifting Lug
Lifting Lug
Chapter 4
Start-Up After Repair
Loading the 700H EEPROM If you replace the Output Power Module or Control Board in a 700H drive you must load information about the Power Module or Control Board into the Power EEPROM Contact Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support for instructions and tools for performing this operation
Be prepared to furnish the following information when you contact support
bull Product Catalog Numberbull Product Serial Numberbull Firmware Revision Level
ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing
Phone United StatesCanada
12625128176 (7 AM - 6 PM CST)14406465800 (24 hour support)
Outside United StatesCanada
You can access the phone number for your country via the InternetGo to httpwwwabcomClick on Support (httpsupportrockwellautomationcom)Under Contact Customer Support click on Phone Support
Internet rArr Go to httpwwwabcomsupportabdrives
E-mail rArr supportdrivesrarockwellcom
4-2 Start-Up After Repair
Before Applying Power to the Drive
1 Check for zero volts between DC+ and DC-
2 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the
points listed in Table 4A on page 4-3 to test the Rectifying Module (on AC Three-Phase drives) A forward biased diode test checks the semiconductor junctions between the terminals and measures the voltage drop across those junctions To pass each test the meter must beep(1) once and display a voltage within the specification shown in the table If the test finds a short the meter will display 000 and beep continuously If the test finds an open circuit or reversed polarity the meter will display ldquo0Lrdquo (zero load) If the Rectifying Module fails any of these tests replace it
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 UT1 VT2 WT3 UT1 VT2 WT3
DC- DC+R+ R-
(1) Not all makes and models of digital multi-meters beep consult documentation for your meter to determine how it indicates a positive result for the forward biased diode test and short circuit
Start-Up After Repair 4-3
Table 4A Forward Biased Diode Tests for Rectifying Module
3 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4B to test the Output Power Module If the Output Power Module fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4B Forward Biased Diode Tests for Output Power Module
4 Perform forward biased diode tests using a digital multimeter on the points listed in Table 4C to test the Brake Chopper Assembly (on drives with Brake Choppers) If the Brake Chopper Assembly fails any of these tests replace it
Table 4C Forward Biased Diode Tests for Brake Chopper Assembly
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
L1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VL2 DC-
L3 DC-L1 DC+R+
0450V plusmn 0075VL2 DC+R+L3 DC+R+DC- L1
0335V plusmn 0075VDC- L2DC- L3DC+R+(1)
(1) If the drive does not contain the brake chopper option the DC+R+ terminal will be labeled DC+
L1Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ L2
DC+R+ L3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
T1 DC-Value should gradually rise to 18VT2 DC-
T3 DC-T1 DC+R+
0290V plusmn 0075V
T2 DC+R+T3 DC+R+DC- T1DC- T2DC- T3DC+R+ T1
Value should gradually rise to 18VDC+R+ T2DC+R+ T3
Meter LeadsNominal meter reading+ -
R DC- Value should gradually rise to 18VR DC+R+ 315V plusmn 0075VDC- R 360V plusmn 075VDC+R+ R Value should gradually rise to 18V
4-4 Start-Up After Repair
Testing with the External DC Power Supply Without Load (Optional)
This is a low current - low risk test for the Output Power Module and drive Control board It requires the recommended high voltage DC-power supply
1 Verify that the external DC power supply is de-energized
2 Connect the power supplyrsquos DC+ to the driversquos DC+ terminal and the power supplyrsquos DC- to the driversquos DC- terminal
3 Set power supply voltage setting to zero
4 Switch on the external DC power supply
5 Slowly increase the external DC power supply output voltage to the driversquos nominal DC bus voltage (135 x Unity)
6 Measure the DC bus voltage and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 306 [DC Bus Voltage] (700S)
ndash parameter 012 [DC Bus Voltage] (700H)
7 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
8 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
9 Start the drive by pressing
10Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
11Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
12Return the configurations to suit the application
13Decrease the DC power supply output voltage to zero Wait until DC bus voltage has decreased to zero Switch off the external DC power supply
Example 480v AC Nominal Voltage
3 2bullΠ
---------------- Vbull 135 480Vtimes 648V= =
Start-Up After Repair 4-5
Testing Without a Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
1 Verify that the motor cables are disconnected
2 Energize the drive
3 Make configuration changes which allow the HIM to issue start and speed commands
4 Make configuration changes which allow operation without an encoder and motor
5 Start the drive by pressing
6 Increase the speed command from zero to base speed by pressing (the up button)
7 Measure the output voltage on each phase and verify that it is balanced If it is unbalanced troubleshoot the drive
8 Stop the drive by pressing (the stop button)
9 Return the configurations to suit the application
Performing the Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on a 700S
The Power Circuit Diagnostic Test on the 700S allow you to diagnose problems in the driversquos power structure without applying large amounts of power
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Energize the drive
4 From the Monitor menu on the HIM press (the escape button) to navigate to the Main menu
5 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to the Start-Up selection and to select Start-Up Then press again to verify your intention to continue with the Start-Up menu
6 Use (the down button) to move the cursor to Power Circuit Diagnostics (Pwr Circuit Diag) and to select Power Circuit Diagnostics
7 Press to begin the Power Circuit Diagnostic routine Follow indications and instructions on the HIM
Esc
4-6 Start-Up After Repair
Testing With the Motor This test allows you to measure several operating parameters and diagnose problems without connecting the motor to its mechanical load
1 Verify that input power wiring and grounding is connected
2 Verify that the motor cables are connected
3 Verify that the motor load is disconnected
4 Energize the drive
5 Start the drive and increase the speed from zero to base speed
6 Measure drive output current and verify that the value is reflected in
ndash parameter 308 [Output Current] (700S)
ndash parameter 003 [Output Current] (700H)
7 Stop the drive
Appendix A
Service Tools and Equipment
Software Tools DriveTools 2000 Drive Executive Drive Explorer and Drive Observer are software tools for uploading downloading and monitoring system parameters
Service tools Service of the PowerFlex frequency converter requires certain kinds of tools devices and test equipment Basic tools devices and test equipment have to meet requirements of professional services The tools have to be in good condition and have to fit how and where they are going to be used
This list of basic service tools which will cover needs of tools for repair and maintenance measurements
Item Description Details1 Oscilloscope Portable digitizing dual channel scope with isolation2 Current clamp 1000A(ac rms) signal output3 Soldering station Soldering de soldering4 Adjustable power supply 01300Vdc 1A adjustable current limit Efore LPS
750-HV or equivalent5 Adjustable power supply 0690Vac (+10) 10A three phase galvanic
isolation6 Multi meter Digital multi meter capable of ac and dc voltage
continuity resistance capacitance measurements and forward diode bias tests Fluke model 87 III or equivalent
7 Insulation tester 1000Vdc8 Torque wrench 112Nm9 Torque wrench 650Nm10 box wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm11 socket extension 230mm12 Wrench 7mm 8mm 10mm 13mm 17mm 19mm 22mm13 Wire cutter14 Nose pliers15 Crimping tools For cable terminals 1524016 Angle wrench17 Screw driver18 Flat nose 72(mm)19 Pozidrive 1 2 320 Phillips 1 2 321 Torx 2522 Hexagonal wrench 4 5 623 ESD-protected place of work Working surface Floor covering seat and earthings24 ESD-protective clothing Wrist wrap shoes overall clothing (coat)25 Power supply (service) Capacity of three phase service 400500690Vac
250A
A-2 Service Tools and Equipment
26 CK-2 Cable kit of DC power supply for PowerFlex frame 9 units
27 RT-1 Module replacement tool for PowerFlex frame 9 units28 Fiber-optic repair kit
Item Description Details
Appendix B
Schematics
put Conditioning Circuitry for Drives with AC Input
PEPE
L3T
MOV
asse
mbly
L2S
LIR
L3T
L2S
LIR
PCB
REAC
TOR
LINE
CMRE
ACTO
R
REAC
TOR
CM
L3T
L2S
LIR
To Pow
erC
ircui
try
Figu
re B
1
Inpu
t Con
ditio
ning
Circ
uitr
y fo
r Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
B-2 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ningDC
-DC
+R+
K3
K2
K1
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
2
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-3
Power Circuitry for 700S Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J1
To V
olta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d J2
WT
3 V
T2
UT
1
DC+
DC-
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
UT1
WT3
VT2
67
Fibe
r
To Power Interface J9 (U_Gate)
To Power Interface J10 (V_Gate)
To Power Interface J11 (W_Gate)
To Power Interface J14 (Vbus_Tx)
To Power Interface J13 (Vbus_Rx)
To Power Interface J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1 To Power Interface J8 (Gate_Enable)
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
3
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00S
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-4 Schematics
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with AC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n
2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
X8
X3X2X1
X9
X41
X4
Main
s Volt
age
Supp
ress
ion
Recti
fier B
oard
X13
X5X6
X10
X11
X12
L3T
L2S
LIR
Fr
om A
CIn
put
Con
ditio
ning
K1
To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
4
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith A
C In
put
Schematics B-5
Power Circuitry for 700H Drives with DC Input
4
2
W_LO
W_HI
TERM W
TERM V
V_HI
V_LO
TERM U
U_LO
U_HI
I_V
I_W
I_U
UT1
VT2
WT
3
R-
Mea
sure
men
ts
DC-
DC+
Powe
r Boa
rd
X10
X7X5
X8
X9
M4
Cros
s Plat
eFa
n2
24 V
DC
I_U I_V
I_W
4
44
X10
TERM A
BRK
X11
BRK
WT
3
VT2
UT1
4
X6X1
X4
DC+ 1
IFS 2X1
5
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
M M3
EMC
Prot
ectio
nPl
ate
Fan
M M2
Fan
Inve
rter
Cooli
ng F
anM
224
VDC
224
VDC
DC+
R+
DC-
PE PE
F1R1
CR2
M
F1R1
CR2
M
X50
CR1
Pilot
Rela
y
CR1
MM
ain D
C Co
ntac
tor
MCR
2Pr
echa
rge
1 2 5 6
Exte
rnal
Circ
uitry
DCSo
urce
M
DC B
usPr
echa
rge
Cont
rol
2 To Opto Adapter Board
24 V
DC
To O
pto
Adap
ter B
oard
To F
an P
ower
Sup
ply
Figu
re B
5
Pow
er C
ircui
try
for 7
00H
Driv
es w
ith D
C In
put
B-6 Schematics
Circuit Board Connections for 700S Drives
HIM
J10
J34
J2 J7 J1
TB2
P5 P4 P680
P1Co
mm
Inpu
t
P1Fe
edba
ckIn
puts
P2 P3
J11
72
J1
2 9
20
10
50 34
RS23
2
FLEX
IO
50
J35
P2 P3
RX
34
J2 -U -V -WDC-
DC+
J8 +24V
J5 T
x
J4 R
x
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X42
Cont
rol
Chas
sis F
anM5
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
2
From
Po
wer
Mod
ule
From
Pow
erM
odul
e
Main
Cont
rol
Boar
d
Sync
hLink
Feed
back
Optio
nBo
ard
Drive
Logix
Cont
rolle
r
NetL
inxDa
ught
erca
rd
M6
J3 J17
J18
J15
Exte
rnal
24V
DC
1 =
24V
3 =
Com
mon
(75W
min)
J5
J6 T
x
J7 R
x
J4
22
+24
V Iso
+12
V
-12
V
+5V
Pan
Fan
Cont
rol
J16
TB1
J9
TXJ8
Powe
r Int
erfa
ce B
oard
80W
Powe
rSu
pply
Volta
ge
Feed
back
Boar
d
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
67
Fibe
r
From Power Board J9 (U_Gate)
From Power Board J10 (V_Gate)
From Power Board J11 (W_Gate)
From Power Board J14 (Vbus_Tx)
From Power Board J13 (Vbus_Rx)
From Power Board J12 (ADconv)
45
23
1From Power Board (Gate_Enable)
J8J9
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
M
M
Fibe
r
8 9
9 8
Figu
re B
6 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0S D
rives
Schematics B-7
Circuit Board Connections for 700H Drives
HIM
20
X3J3
J2J1
X2
X1
HIM
DOOR
EXTE
RNAL
DPI
X4
PWR
STS
PORT
MOD
NET
ANE
T B
9
9
DPI A
ssem
bly
EXAM
PLE
20-H
IM-A
3
20-V
B006
01
DPI
Inte
rface
Boar
d
DPI
Com
mOp
tion
DPI
Beze
l
X8
67
Fibe
r4
52
31
24 V
DC
From
Pow
er B
oard
From
Pow
er B
oard
Opto
Ada
pter
Boar
dJ1
Exte
rnal
24V
dc
J1
2
X1
37
Cont
rol B
oard
X2(S
lot A
)
20C-
DA1-
A(2
4V d
c Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
or
20
C-DA
1-B
(115
V ac
Digi
tal In
put
w A
nalog
IO)
10
Analo
gIO
8 1
0
Digit
alIn
puts
X3(S
lot B
)
20C-
DO1
(Digi
tal O
utpu
tOp
tion)
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
3
Digit
alOu
tput
s
X4
(Slot
C)
Optio
nBo
ard
X5
(Slot
D)
Optio
nBo
ard
X6(S
lot E
)
20C-
DPI1
(DPI
Com
mun
icatio
nsOp
tion)
X1
X3X2
X7(R
S-23
2Pr
ogra
mm
ingPo
rt)
Figu
re B
7 C
ircui
t Boa
rd C
onne
ctio
ns fo
r 70
0H D
rives
B-8 Schematics
Fan Power Supply Connections
X8
F2 6
A
X2
4
Fan
Freq
uenc
yC
onve
rter
+-
Off
S1-
1
Off
S1-
2
On
S1-
3
Off
S1-
4
S1
- Set
up S
witc
h
F1 6
A
From
Pow
erB
oard
X10
From
Pow
erB
oard
X7
M1
Bla
ck
Yello
wG
reen
Blu
e
Mai
n Fa
nM
Bla
ck 6
Bla
ck 5
Bla
ck 4
Bla
ck 3
Bla
ck 2
Bla
ck 1
X4
X5
22
mf
10 M
W
22
mf
10 M
WB
row
n
7 m
f
Fan
Are
a
Are
a U
nder
Mai
n P
ower
Ter
min
al S
trip
Are
a U
nder
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y P
late
Figu
re B
8
Fan
Pow
er S
uppl
y Co
nnec
tions
Appendix C
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Diagrams on the following pages illustrate disassembly and assembly of the drive and its sub-systems
C-2 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
700S 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
1
700S
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-3
700H 261A 300A Mechanical Construction
S
Figu
re C
2
700H
261
A 3
00A
Mec
hani
cal C
onst
ruct
ion
C-4 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Cross Plate (terminals) and Internal Fan
Figu
re C
3
Cros
s Pl
ate
(term
inal
s) a
nd In
tern
al F
an
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-5
EMC-Protection Plate
Figu
re C
4
EMC-
Prot
ectio
n Pl
ate
C-6 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Capacitor Sub-Assembly
DC
+
DC
-
Figu
re C
5
Capa
cito
r Sub
-Ass
embl
y
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-7
Fan Sub-Assembly
Figu
re C
6
Fan
Sub-
Asse
mbl
y
C-8 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Control Bracket
Figu
re C
7
Cont
rol B
rack
et
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-9
Rectifying Module
Figu
re C
8
Rec
tifyi
ng M
odul
e
C-10 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Power Module
Figu
re C
9
Pow
er M
odul
e
Disassembly Assembly Diagrams C-11
Key to ID Numbers The following table describes the parts identified by balloons in the mechanical drawings
Id No Description Shown in2 DC Bus Capacitor ELKO 3300uF 420V Figure C53 Fan 230W Figure C65 AC-chokefilter 310A Figure C1
Figure C26 Frame Figure C1
Figure C28 Cover (power) Figure C1
Figure C29 Cover (connection) Figure C1
Figure C210 Bushing plate Figure C1
Figure C212 Earthing plate Figure C215 Earthing cover 3 Figure C1
Figure C220 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C323 Upper plate Figure C1
Figure C226 Busbar DC- and brake Figure C1
Figure C228 Rectifying board Figure C829 Diode mod SKKH 33016 Figure C830 IGBTDiode SKM 195GAL123D (brake) Figure C831 Stand-off insulator M625 (brake) Figure C1
Figure C232 Busbar DC connection Figure C534 Busbar DC+ Figure C535 Insulator DC+- Figure C536 Busbar DC- Figure C538 Capacitor 220nF1250V 500V 6mm Figure C839 Discharging resistor 2x8k Figure C640 Rectifying module sub-as Figure C1
Figure C240 Rectifying module sub-as (brake) Figure C1
Figure C241 Fan plate Figure C642 Screw M6 x14 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
44 Screw M6 x16 Z4-1 (combination) Figure C545 Screw M5x20 TX (combination) Figure C5
Figure C852 Washer (straight) M8 SFS3738 Figure C5
Figure C8Figure C9
53 Washer (cone) M8 DIN679 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
54 Screw hexagonal M8 X 20 Figure C5Figure C8Figure C9
55 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C659 Bushing rubber GD21 Figure C1
Figure C2
Id No Description Shown in63 Control bracket Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C7
64 EMC-protection plate (power) Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C4
66 Cable lug KP40 Figure C1 Figure C2
68 Fan power supply 69 Internal fan Figure C3
Figure C470 Cross plate (terminals) Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C3
75 Control frame Figure C1 Figure C2
81 Screw M4 x 8 Figure C883 Control cable conduit Figure C1
Figure C284 Plate gasket 52486 Figure C1
Figure C285 Bushing rubber 52515 Figure C1
Figure C286 Cover (control cable conduit) Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly H Figure C1
Figure C288 Terminal sub-assembly TL Figure C1
Figure C289 Fan sub-assembly Figure C1
Figure C290 Stop plate 34 Figure C1
Figure C291 Bushing rubber GD9 Figure C1
Figure C292 Capacitor sub-Assembly Figure C1
Figure C293 Heat sink (rectifying module) Figure C894 Frame (heat sink rectifier) Figure C895 Busbar rectifying board Figure C896 Busbar rectifier + Figure C897 Insulator rectifier Figure C898 Busbar rectifier - Figure C899 Busbar brake Figure C8100 Bushing rubber GD16 Figure C6102 Clamp for ferrite ring Figure C4103 Ferrite ring packet Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C4
104 VaconBus adapter Figure C7105 Finger proof shield Figure C3109 Insulator capacitor Figure C5110 Insulator DC-connection Figure C5
C-12 Disassembly Assembly Diagrams
Id No Description Shown in112 Cable DC+ Figure C5114 Cable DC- Figure C5115 Screw M5 x 10 Figure C9116 Fan power supply cover Figure C1
Figure C2117 Power module sub-as 261A Figure C1
Figure C2Figure C9
117 Power module sub-as 300A Figure C1 Figure C2Figure C9
118 Bushing rubber GD48 Figure C1 Figure C2
200 700S Control Assembly Figure C1 201 700S Voltage Feedback Circuit Board Figure C1 202 700S Power Interface Circuit Board Figure C1 203 DPI HIM Assembly Figure C1
Figure C2204 MOV Figure C1
Figure C2205 Fan (Control frame) Figure C1206 700H Control Assembly Figure C2
Publication PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P ndash July 2004 Copyright copy 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJDFFile false CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
Description | ||||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | ||||
100 Gloss Cover | ||||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 100 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | 50 | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PFLEX-TG001A-EN-P | PowerFlex 700HS Hardware Service Manual Frame 9 | EA | 1 | NA | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 07212004 | 5 | B | PERFECT | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 98 | 49 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | NA | 14 | 3LEFT | LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | NA |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | 5 | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required Enter the word DIGITAL or the word OFFSET which ever one describes the production pricing used for this item | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text InkAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 44 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings We intend you use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has 31 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 13 fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has 34 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 10 fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has 29 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 15 fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has 27 fields already completed and if your publication uses the default values already completed you must complete the additional 17 fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add them to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade If you are using Acrobat 80 please contact RRD about attaching print specs because RA has not tested this software version yet |